User manual - EXZS20_Z690_M29_FC

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDigital CameraEX-ZS20

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺮﻟﺍ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ •

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ •

ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﻘﻠﻌﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ •

http://www.exilim.com/

Summary of content (138 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-120‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪2..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‪3.............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪9.............................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪12 ............
PAGE 5
‫❚❙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪47 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪48 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪) ............................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(‪49 .....‬‬ ‫❚ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫❚❙‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪50 ......................................................................................
PAGE 6
‫❚❙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪71 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ..............................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪73 .....‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪).................................................................................‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪74 .....‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪) .............................................................‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪74 .....(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪) ............
PAGE 7
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪103‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪103 ...(Eye-Fi) .................................................. Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪103 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) ............................................................‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪104 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) .........................................‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪104 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪) .............
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 10
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(38‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(66‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 27‬ﻭ‪(61‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(38‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(19‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.[8] (DISP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(107‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 26‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺃﻭ ًﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-120‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ُﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺪﺍﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺪﺃ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ ١١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB/AV‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 17
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫)ﺿﻮء‪/‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(119‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) “(Language‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 21
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪107‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪106‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ُﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪OPEN‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 29‬ﻭ‪.(67‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﻄﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ( ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎً ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪47‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...
PAGE 29
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ً‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (77‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪*.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫* ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻷﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (9‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ُﻣﻌﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫– ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫– ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫– ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ( ) [2‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.( ) [2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) [8] (DISP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(12‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫) ( ]‪[2‬‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (135‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ G‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ )ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ( ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ Ï‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺮﻱ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ ،“MENU‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(103‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﻭ”ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ“ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (55‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬ ‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 46
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(34‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫”‪ “10M‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(37‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 48
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎً ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.133‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ )‪ (BS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[SET‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ` ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ` ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪BEST SHOT‬؟‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 53
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ For YouTube‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻂء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ً .
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(“ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ(“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 71‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ”ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ“ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫´ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ*‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬ ‫ﺣ
PAGE 58
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻭﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪ S‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” (66‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪EV‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫]‪[4]/[6‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪) EV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ((‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺟﻴﺪ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺃﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﻘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ( ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO 200‬‬ ‫‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫‪ISO 800‬‬ ‫‪ISO 1600‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ )ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.
PAGE 67
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 29‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫»‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]‪[4] [6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ([) z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )‪ (EMC-7A‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪AV‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB/AV‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB/AV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 70
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﺘﺺ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺟﺰ ًءﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ [8] (DISP‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫]‪ [8] [2‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪ à‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٦٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.
PAGE 77
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ˆ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫]‪[4] [6‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫]‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻮء ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (55‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(71‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”)‪ “PTP(PictBridge‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 81
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ 3.5"x5‬ﻭ"‪ 5"x7‬ﻭ"‪ 4"x6‬ﻭ‪ A4‬ﻭ"‪ 8.5"x11‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.DPOF‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 83
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪ .‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.(82‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(106‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 87‬ﻭ‪.(95‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) (Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫‪،Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫)‪Windows XP (SP3‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ “(Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 122‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB/AV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪.“DCIM‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ )‪ (Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ“‬ ‫)‪ (Windows XP‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ ،“DCIM‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ”‪.“STD‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪YouTube‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،YouTube Uploader for CASIO‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫)‪ (http://www.youtube.com/‬ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ( ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ )ﻣﻼﻙ( ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ ٢٠٤٨ “For YouTube‬ﻡ ﺏ ﺑﺠﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Photo Transport‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Photo Transport‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Photo Transport‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪ .(http://www.casio-intl.com/support/‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(87‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺪء‬ ‫‪.Photo Transport‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪CASIO‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Photo Transport‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ]ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺣﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪.Macintosh‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB/AV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻣﻄﻔﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،QuickTime‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ .Macintosh‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS X 10.3.
PAGE 99
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Eye-Fi Manager‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(101‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .CIMG9999‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)‪.Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(71‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(Eye-Fi) Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫‪Eye - Fi‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(109‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ٢٠١٢ ،‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪12/7/10‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪10/7/12‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪7/10/12‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ 30 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [r‬ﻭ]‪(REC/PLAY) [p‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫‪REC/PLAY‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪(USB) USB‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Mass‬‬ ‫‪Storage‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 87‬ﻭ‪ .(95‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﻛﻴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 114
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 115
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺪ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 117
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎً ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 118
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎً ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ YouTube‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪.YouTube, LLC‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ YouTube‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪.YouTube, LLC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 120
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳُﻌﺰﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 21‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(111‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬ ‫‪Eye - Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬ ‫= ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪/...//// :‬‬ ‫= ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪...//// :‬‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪REC/PLAY‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪Mass Storage‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 125
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(15‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-120‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(38‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 20‬ﻭ‪.(107‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(111‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ALERT‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻄﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SYSTEM ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ SDHC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDXC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪10M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬ ‫‪VGA‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٥٫٥٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢*SD‬‬ ‫‪٢٧٩١‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧١‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪٤١٩١‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٤٫٩٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫‪٣١٦٠‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫
PAGE 133
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫)‪(٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٠٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠٫٦‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢*SD‬‬ ‫‪ ١٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ*‪٣‬‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٣١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٥٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٢٢٦٫٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪ ٧٩٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪
PAGE 134
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪2.
PAGE 135
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)‪ F3.5 (W‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪) F11.3 (W‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ‪(ND‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 137
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-120‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ ٣٥٫٥‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪ ٤٠٫٢ x‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ ٥٫٠ x‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ١٤‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 138
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.